blob: cbb8cf234aa7514c6e05d55b9724c1ea41d2dd7a [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000048#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000049#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000050#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000051using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000052using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000053
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000054#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
55
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000056// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
57// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
58// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
59// minimum reasonable default.
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000060static cl::opt<unsigned>
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000061PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
62 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000063
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000064static cl::opt<bool>
65DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
66 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
67
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000068static cl::opt<bool>
69SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
70 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
71
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000072static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
73 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
74 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000075
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000076static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
77 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
78 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
79 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
80 "predicated store"));
81
82static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
83 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
84 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
85 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
86
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000087STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +000088STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000089STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +000090STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +000091STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000092STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000093STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +000094
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000095namespace {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +000096 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +000097 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
98 // cases composing the case group.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +000099 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
100 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
101 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +0000102 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
103 // switch for that PHI.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000104 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
105
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000106 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
107 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
108 ConstantInt *Value;
109 BasicBlock *Dest;
110
111 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
112 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
113
114 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
115 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
116 return Value < RHS.Value;
117 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000118
119 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000120 };
121
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000122class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000123 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000124 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000125 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000126 AssumptionCache *AC;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000127 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
128 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000129 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000130 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000131 BasicBlock *Pred,
132 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000133 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
134 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000135
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000136 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000137 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000138 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000139 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000140 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000141 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000142 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000143 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000144
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000145public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000146 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
147 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC)
148 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000149 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
150};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000151}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000152
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000153/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000154/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000155static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
156 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000157
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000158 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
159 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
160 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
161 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
162 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000163 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000164
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000165 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
166 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
167 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000168 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
169 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
170 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
171 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
172 return false;
173 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000174
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000175 return true;
176}
177
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000178/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
179/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
180/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000181static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
182 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000183 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000184 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
185 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
186 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
187
188 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000189 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000190 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
191 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
192 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
193 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
194 if (!Ci2) return false;
195 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
196 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
197 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
198 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
199 return false;
200
201 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
202 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
203 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000204 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
205 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
206 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000207 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
208 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
209 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000210 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000211 return false;
212 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
213 }
214 return true;
215}
216
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000217/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
218/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
219/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
220/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000221static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
222 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000223 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000224
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000225 PHINode *PN;
226 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
227 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
228 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000229}
230
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000231/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
232/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
233/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000234/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000235static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000236 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000237 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000238 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000239 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000240}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000241
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000242/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
243/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000244/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
245/// which works well enough for us.
246///
247/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000248/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
249/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
250/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
251/// set and true is returned.
252///
253/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
254/// Select whose cost is 2.
255///
256/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
257/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
258/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000259static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper71b7b682014-08-21 05:55:13 +0000260 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction*> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000261 unsigned &CostRemaining,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000262 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000263 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000264 if (!I) {
265 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
266 // can be executed unconditionally.
267 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
268 if (C->canTrap())
269 return false;
270 return true;
271 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000272 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000273
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000274 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000275 // the bottom of this block.
276 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000277
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000278 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
279 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000280 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
281 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000282 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000283 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000284
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000285 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
286 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000287 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000288
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000289 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
290 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
291
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000292 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
293 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
294 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000295 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000296 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000297
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000298 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000299
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000300 if (Cost > CostRemaining)
301 return false;
302
303 CostRemaining -= Cost;
304
305 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
306 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000307 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000308 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000309 return false;
310 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
311 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000312 return true;
313}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000314
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000315/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000316/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000317static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000318 // Normal constant int.
319 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000320 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000321 return CI;
322
323 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
324 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000325 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000326
327 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
328 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
329 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
330
331 // IntToPtr const int.
332 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
333 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
334 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
335 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
336 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
337 return CI;
338 else
339 return cast<ConstantInt>
340 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
341 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000342 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000343}
344
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000345namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000346
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000347/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
348/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
349/// structure.
350/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
351/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
352/// representing the different cases for the switch.
353/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
354/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
355/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
356/// fail.
357struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000358 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000359 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
360 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
361 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
362 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000363
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000364 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000365 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
366 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
367 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000368 }
369
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000370 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000371 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000372 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000373 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000374
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000375private:
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000376
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000377 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
378 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
379 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
380 if(CompValue && CompValue != NewVal) return false;
381 CompValue = NewVal;
382 return (CompValue != nullptr);
383 }
384
385 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
386 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
387 /// match depending on isEQ).
388 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
389 /// against is placed in CompValue.
390 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
391 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000392 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000393 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
394 ICmpInst *ICI;
395 ConstantInt *C;
396 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
397 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
398 return false;
399 }
400
401 Value *RHSVal;
402 ConstantInt *RHSC;
403
404 // Pattern match a special case
405 // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x
406 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
407 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
408 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
409 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
410 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
411 if (Not.isPowerOf2()) {
412 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
413 if(!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
414 return false;
415
416 Vals.push_back(C);
417 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
418 C->getValue() | Not));
419 UsedICmps++;
420 return true;
421 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000422 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000423
424 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
425 if(!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
426 return false;
427
428 UsedICmps++;
429 Vals.push_back(C);
430 return ICI->getOperand(0);
431 }
432
433 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000434 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
435 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436
437 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
438 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
439 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
440 if(match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
441 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
442 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
443 }
444
445 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
446 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
447 // x != 0 && x != 1.
448 if (!isEQ)
449 Span = Span.inverse();
450
451 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
452 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
453 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000454 }
455
456 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000457 if(!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
458 return false;
459
460 // Add all values from the range to the set
461 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
462 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000463
464 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000465 return true;
466
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000467 }
468
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000469 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000470 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
471 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
472 /// vector.
473 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000474 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000475 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
476 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000477
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000478 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
479 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000480
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000481 // Initialize
482 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000483
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000484 while(!DFT.empty()) {
485 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000486
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000487 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
488 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
489 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
490 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
491 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
492 continue;
493 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000494
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000495 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000496 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000497 // Match succeed, continue the loop
498 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000499 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000500
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000501 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
502 // comparison against the same value as the others.
503 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
504 if (!Extra) {
505 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000506 continue;
507 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000508 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
509 CompValue = nullptr;
510 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000511 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000512 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000513};
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000514
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000515}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000516
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000517static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000518 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000519 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
520 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
521 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
522 if (BI->isConditional())
523 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000524 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
525 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000526 }
527
528 TI->eraseFromParent();
529 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
530}
531
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000532/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000533/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000534Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000535 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000536 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
537 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
538 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000539 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
540 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
541 CV = SI->getCondition();
542 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000543 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000544 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000545 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000546 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000547 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000548
549 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000550 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000551 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
552 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000553 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000554 CV = Ptr;
555 }
556 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000557 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000558}
559
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000560/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000561/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000562BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000563GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000564 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
565 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000566 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000567 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
568 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
569 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
570 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000571 return SI->getDefaultDest();
572 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000573
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000574 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000575 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000576 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
577 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000578 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000579 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000580 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000581}
582
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000583
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000584/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000585/// in the list that match the specified block.
586static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
587 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000588 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000589}
590
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000591/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000592static bool
593ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
594 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
595 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
596
597 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
598 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
599 std::swap(V1, V2);
600
601 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
602 if (V1->size() == 1) {
603 // Just scan V2.
604 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
605 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
606 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
607 return true;
608 }
609
610 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
611 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
612 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
613 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
614 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
615 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
616 return true;
617 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
618 ++i1;
619 else
620 ++i2;
621 }
622 return false;
623}
624
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000625/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
626/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
627/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
628/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
629/// very limited form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000630bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
631SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000632 BasicBlock *Pred,
633 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000634 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
635 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
636
637 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
638 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
639 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
640
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000641 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
642 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
643
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000644 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000645 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000646 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
647 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000648 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000649
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000650 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000651 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000652 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000653 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000654
655 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
656 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
657 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
658 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
659 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
660 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000661 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000662 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000663
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000664 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
665 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
666 // uncond br.
667 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
668 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000669 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000670 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000671
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000672 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000673 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000674
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000675 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
676 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000677
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000678 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
679 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000680 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000681
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000682 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
683 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000684 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
685 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
686 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000687
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000688 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000689 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000690
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000691 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
692 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000693 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000694 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
695 if (HasWeight)
696 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
697 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000698 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000699 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
700 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000701 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
702 --i;
703 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000704 if (HasWeight) {
705 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
706 Weights.pop_back();
707 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000708 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
709 SI->removeCase(i);
710 }
711 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000712 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000713 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
714 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
715 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000716
717 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000718 return true;
719 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000720
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000721 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
722 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000723 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000724 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000725 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
726 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000727 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000728 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
729 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
730 }
731 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000732
733 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
734 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000735 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000736 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
737 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
738 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
739 break;
740 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000741
742 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000743 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000744
745 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
746 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000747 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI)
748 if (*SI != CheckEdge)
749 (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000750 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000751 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000752
753 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000754 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000755 (void) NI;
756
757 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
758 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
759
760 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
761 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000762}
763
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000764namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000765 /// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000766 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
767 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
768 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
769 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
770 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
771 }
772 };
773}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000774
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000775static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
776 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
777 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
778 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000779 if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()))
780 return 1;
781 if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue())
782 return 0;
783 return -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000784}
785
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000786static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000787 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000788 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
789 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
790 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
791
792 return false;
793}
794
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000795/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
796/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
797/// metadata.
798static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
799 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000800 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000801 assert(MD);
802 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000803 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000804 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000805 }
806
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000807 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
808 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
809 // default weight to be the first entry.
810 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
811 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
812 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
813 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
814 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000815 }
816}
817
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000818/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000819static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000820 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
821 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
822 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
823 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
824 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000825 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000826}
827
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000828/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
829/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000830/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
831/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000832bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
833 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000834 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
835 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
836 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
837 bool Changed = false;
838
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000839 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000840 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000841 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000842
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000843 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
844 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
845 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
846
847 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
848 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000849 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000850 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
851
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000852 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000853 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
854
855 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
856 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
857 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000858 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000859
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000860 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
861 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000862 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
863 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
864
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000865 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000866 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000867 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000868 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
869 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
870 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000871 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
872 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
873 // successor's weights
874 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000875
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000876 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000877 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000878 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000879 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000880 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
881 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
882 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000883 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000884
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000885 if (PredDefault == BB) {
886 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
887 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000888 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
889 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
890 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
891 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
892 else {
893 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
894 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000895
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000896 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
897 // Increase weight for the default case.
898 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000899 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
900 Weights.pop_back();
901 }
902
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000903 PredCases.pop_back();
904 --i; --e;
905 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000906
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000907 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000908 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
909 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
910 PredDefault = BBDefault;
911 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
912 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000913
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000914 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
915 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000916 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
917 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
918 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
919 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
920 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000921 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
922 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
923 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
924 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
925 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
926 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000927 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000928 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000929
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000930 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
931 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
932 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
933 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
934 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
935 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
936 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
937 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000938 } else {
939 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
940 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
941 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000942 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000943 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000944 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
945 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
946 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000947
948 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
949 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
950 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
951 Weights.pop_back();
952 }
953
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000954 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
955 PredCases.pop_back();
956 --i; --e;
957 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000958
959 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
960 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000961 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
962 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
963 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000964 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
965 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000966 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
967 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
968 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
969 }
970
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000971 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
972 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000973 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000974 PTIHandled.begin(),
975 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000976 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
977 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000978 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000979 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000980 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000981 }
982
983 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
984 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
985 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +0000986 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
987 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000988
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000989 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000990 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000991 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000992 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000993 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000994 }
995
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000996 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000997 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
998 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000999 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001000 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1001 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001002
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001003 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1004 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1005 FitWeights(Weights);
1006
1007 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1008
1009 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1010 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
1011 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
1012 }
1013
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001014 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001015
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1017 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1018 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001019 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001020 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1021 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001022 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001023 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001024 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00001025 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1026 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001027 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001028 }
1029 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1030 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001031
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001032 Changed = true;
1033 }
1034 }
1035 return Changed;
1036}
1037
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001038// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1039// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1040// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001041static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1042 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001043 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001044 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001045 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001046 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1047 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1048 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1049 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
1050 return false;
1051 }
1052 }
1053 }
1054 return true;
1055}
1056
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001057static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1058
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001059/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1060/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1061/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001062static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001063 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001064 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1065 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1066 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1067 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1068 // identical order.
1069 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1070 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1071
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001072 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1073 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1074
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001075 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001076 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1077 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1078 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1079 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1080 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001081 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001082 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001083 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001084 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001085 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001086 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001087 return false;
1088
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001089 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001090
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001091 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001092 do {
1093 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1094 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1095 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1096 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001097
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001098 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1099 return Changed;
1100
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001101 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1102 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1103 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001104 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001105 if (!I2->use_empty())
1106 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001107 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001108 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {
Piotr Padlewskidc9b2cf2015-10-02 22:12:22 +00001109 LLVMContext::MD_tbaa, LLVMContext::MD_range,
1110 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath, LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
Artur Pilipenko5c5011d2015-11-02 17:53:51 +00001111 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull, LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1112 LLVMContext::MD_align, LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1113 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001114 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001115 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001116 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001117
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001118 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1119 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001120 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1121 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1122 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1123 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1124 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001125 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001126 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001127 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001128 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001129 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001130
1131 return true;
1132
1133HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001134 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1135 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001136 return Changed;
1137
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001138 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001139 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001140 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001141 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1142 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1143 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1144 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1145 continue;
1146
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001147 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1148 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1149 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1150 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
1151 return Changed;
1152
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001153 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001154 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001155 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001156 return Changed;
1157 }
1158 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001159
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001160 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001161 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001162 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001163 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001164 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1165 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001166 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001167 }
1168
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001169 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001170 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1171 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1172 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1173 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1174 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001175 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001176 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001177 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001178 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001179 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1180 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001181 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001182
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001183 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1184 // that determines the right value.
1185 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001186 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001187 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1188 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1189 BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName()));
1190
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001191 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1192 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1193 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1194 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001195 }
1196 }
1197
1198 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001199 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI)
1200 AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001201
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001202 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001203 return true;
1204}
1205
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001206/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001207/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1208/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1209/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1210static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1211 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1212 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1213 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1214
1215 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1216 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001217 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1218 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1219 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001220 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001221 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1222 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1223 return false;
1224 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001225 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1226 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1227 return false;
1228
1229 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001230 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001231 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001232 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001233 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1234 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001235 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001236 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001237 } else {
1238 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1239 break;
1240 }
1241 }
1242 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1243 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001244
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001245 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1246 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1247 // instructions in an identical order.
1248 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001249 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1250 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1251 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001252 // Skip debug info.
1253 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1254 if (RI1 == RE1)
1255 return false;
1256 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1257 if (RI2 == RE2)
1258 return false;
1259 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1260 ++RI1;
1261 ++RI2;
1262
1263 bool Changed = false;
1264 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1265 // Skip debug info.
1266 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1267 if (RI1 == RE1)
1268 return Changed;
1269 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1270 if (RI2 == RE2)
1271 return Changed;
1272
1273 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001274 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001275 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1276 // perform the same operation.
1277 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1278 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1279 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
David Majnemerba275f92015-08-19 19:54:02 +00001280 I1->isEHPad() || I2->isEHPad() ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001281 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1282 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1283 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1284 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001285 !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001286 return Changed;
1287
1288 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001289 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001290 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1291 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1292 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1293 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1294 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1295 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1296 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1297 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1298 SwapOpnds = true;
1299 }
1300 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1301 if (SwapOpnds)
1302 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1303 return Changed;
1304 }
1305
1306 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1307 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1308 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001309 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001310 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001311 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1312 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1313 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001314 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1315 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1316 if (Op1Idx != ~0U ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001317 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1318 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1319 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1320 if (SwapOpnds)
1321 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1322 return Changed;
1323 }
1324 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1325 Op1Idx = I;
1326 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1327 }
1328
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001329 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1330 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1331
1332 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1333 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1334 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1335 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1336 if (!NewPN) {
1337 NewPN =
1338 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001339 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001340 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1341 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1342 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1343 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001344 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1345 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001346 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001347 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1348 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001349
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001350 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1351 // instruction in the basic block down.
1352 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin());
1353 // Sink the instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001354 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd->getIterator(),
1355 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001356 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1357 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1358 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1359
1360 if (!I2->use_empty())
1361 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1362 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001363 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1364 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001365 I2->eraseFromParent();
1366
1367 if (UpdateRE1)
1368 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1369 if (UpdateRE2)
1370 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001371 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001372 NumSinkCommons++;
1373 Changed = true;
1374 }
1375 return Changed;
1376}
1377
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001378/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1379/// conditional block.
1380///
1381/// We are looking for code like the following:
1382/// BrBB:
1383/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1384/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1385/// ... // function).
1386/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1387/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1388/// ThenBB:
1389/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1390/// br label EndBB
1391/// EndBB:
1392/// ...
1393/// We are going to transform this into:
1394/// BrBB:
1395/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1396/// ... //
1397/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1398/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1399/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1400/// ...
1401///
1402/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1403/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001404static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1405 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001406 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1407 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001408 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001409
1410 // Volatile or atomic.
1411 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001412 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001413
1414 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1415
1416 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
1417 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10;
1418 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
1419 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) {
1420 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
1421
1422 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1423 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001424 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001425
1426 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1427 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1428 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1429 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1430 return SI->getValueOperand();
1431 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001432 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001433 }
1434
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001435 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001436}
1437
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001438/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001439///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001440/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1441/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1442/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1443/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1444/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1445///
1446/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1447/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1448/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1449/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1450///
1451///
1452/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1453/// \code
1454/// BB:
1455/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1456/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1457/// ThenBB:
1458/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001459/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001460/// EndBB:
1461/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1462/// ...
1463/// \endcode
1464///
1465/// Into this IR:
1466/// \code
1467/// BB:
1468/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1469/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1470/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1471/// ...
1472/// \endcode
1473///
1474/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001475static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001476 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001477 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1478 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1479 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1480 return false;
1481
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001482 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1483 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1484
1485 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1486 // to swap the select operands later.
1487 bool Invert = false;
1488 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1489 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1490 Invert = true;
1491 }
1492 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1493
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001494 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1495 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1496 // - They are defined in BB, and
1497 // - They have no side effects, and
1498 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1499 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1500
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001501 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001502 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1503 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001504 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001505 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001506 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001507 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001508 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001509 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1510 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001511
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001512 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001513 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001514 ++SpeculationCost;
1515 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001516 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001517
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001518 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001519 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1520 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1521 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001522 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001523 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001524 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1525 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001526 return false;
1527
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001528 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1529 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1530 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1531
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001532 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001533 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001534 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001535 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001536 i != e; ++i) {
1537 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001538 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1539 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1540 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1541
1542 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001543 }
1544 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001545
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001546 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1547 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1548 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1549 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1550 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1551 I != E; ++I)
1552 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001553 ++SpeculationCost;
1554 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001555 return false;
1556 }
1557
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001558 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1559 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001560 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001561 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001562 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1563 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001564
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001565 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001566 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001567 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001568 continue;
1569
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001570 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1571 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1572 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1573 return false;
1574
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001575 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001576 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1577 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1578 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001579 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1580
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001581 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1582 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001583 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001584 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1585 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001586 unsigned MaxCost = 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold *
1587 TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1588 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001589 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001590
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001591 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1592 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1593 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001594 // constant expression.
1595 ++SpeculationCost;
1596 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001597 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001598 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001599
1600 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1601 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001602 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001603 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001604
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001605 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001606 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001607
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001608 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1609 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
1610 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
1611 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1612 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1613 if (Invert)
1614 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1615 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() +
1616 "." + FalseV->getName());
1617 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1618 }
1619
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001620 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1621 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
1622 for (auto &I: *ThenBB)
1623 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1624
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001625 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001626 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1627 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001628
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001629 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001630 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001631 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1632 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1633 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1634 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1635 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1636 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1637
1638 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1639 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1640 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001641
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001642 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001643 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1644 // destinations were inverted.
1645 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001646 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001647 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1648 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV,
1649 TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName());
1650 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1651 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001652 }
1653
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001654 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001655 return true;
1656}
1657
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001658/// \returns True if this block contains a CallInst with the NoDuplicate
1659/// attribute.
1660static bool HasNoDuplicateCall(const BasicBlock *BB) {
1661 for (BasicBlock::const_iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) {
1662 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I);
1663 if (!CI)
1664 continue;
1665 if (CI->cannotDuplicate())
1666 return true;
1667 }
1668 return false;
1669}
1670
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001671/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001672static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1673 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001674 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001675
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001676 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001677 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1678 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001679 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001680 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001681
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001682 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001683 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001684 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1685 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1686 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001687 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001688
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001689 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1690 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001691
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001692 return true;
1693}
1694
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001695/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1696/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1697/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001698static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001699 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1700 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001701 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1702 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001703 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1704 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001705
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001706 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1707 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001708 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001709 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001710 }
1711
1712 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001713 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001714
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001715 if (HasNoDuplicateCall(BB)) return false;
1716
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001717 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1718 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001719 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001720 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001721 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001722
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001723 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1724 // branch to RealDest.
1725 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1726 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001727
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001728 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001729 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1730 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001731
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001732 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1733 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1734 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1735 // the edge we are about to create.
1736 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1737 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1738 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1739 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001740
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001741 // Update PHI nodes.
1742 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001743
1744 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1745 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1746 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1747 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1748 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1749 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1750 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1751 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1752 continue;
1753 }
1754 // Clone the instruction.
1755 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1756 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001757
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001758 // Update operands due to translation.
1759 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1760 i != e; ++i) {
1761 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1762 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1763 *i = PI->second;
1764 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001765
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001766 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001767 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001768 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001769 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001770 } else {
1771 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1772 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1773 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001774 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001775 }
1776 }
1777
1778 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1779 // to EdgeBB instead.
1780 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1781 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1782 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1783 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1784 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1785 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001786
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001787 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001788 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001789 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001790
1791 return false;
1792}
1793
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001794/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
1795/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001796static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1797 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001798 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1799 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1800 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1801 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1802 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1803 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001804 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1805 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1806 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001807 if (!IfCond ||
1808 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1809 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1810 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001811
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001812 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1813 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1814 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1815 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1816 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1817 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1818 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1819 if (NumPhis > 2)
1820 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001821
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001822 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1823 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1824 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001825 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001826 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1827 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001828 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1829 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001830
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001831 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1832 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001833 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001834 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001835 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001836 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001837 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001838
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001839 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001840 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001841 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001842 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001843 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001844 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001845
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001846 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001847 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1848 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001849 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001850
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001851 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1852 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1853 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1854 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1855 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1856 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1857 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001858
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001859 // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all
1860 // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If
1861 // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not
1862 // worth promoting to select instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001863 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001864 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1865 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1866 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001867 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001868 } else {
1869 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1870 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001871 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001872 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1873 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1874 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1875 return false;
1876 }
1877 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001878
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001879 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001880 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001881 } else {
1882 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1883 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001884 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001885 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1886 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1887 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1888 return false;
1889 }
1890 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001891
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001892 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001893 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001894
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001895 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1896 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001897 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001898 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001899
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001900 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1901 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001902 if (IfBlock1)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001903 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001904 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001905 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001906 if (IfBlock2)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001907 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001908 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001909 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001910
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001911 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1912 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001913 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1914 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001915
1916 SelectInst *NV =
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001917 cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, ""));
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001918 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV);
1919 NV->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001920 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001921 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001922
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001923 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1924 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1925 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1926 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001927 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1928 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001929 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001930 return true;
1931}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001932
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001933/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
1934/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001935/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001936static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001937 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001938 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1939 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1940 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1941 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1942 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001943
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001944 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1945 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1946 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001947 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001948 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001949 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001950 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001951
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001952 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001953 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1954 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1955 // branch into a return.
1956 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1957 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1958 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001959 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001960 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001961 return true;
1962 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001963
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001964 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1965 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1966 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1967 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001968
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001969 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1970 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
1971 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
1972 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
1973 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
1974 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
1975 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001976
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001977 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
1978 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
1979 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
1980 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
1981 // safe.
1982 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
1983 if (TCV->canTrap())
1984 return false;
1985 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
1986 if (FCV->canTrap())
1987 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001988
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001989 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
1990 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
1991 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1992 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001993
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001994 // Insert select instructions where needed.
1995 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001996 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001997 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001998 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
1999 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2000 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2001 } else {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002002 TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue,
2003 FalseValue, "retval");
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002004 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002005 }
2006
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002007 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002008 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
2009
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00002010 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002011
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002012 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002013 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
2014 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002015
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002016 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2017
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002018 return true;
2019}
2020
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002021/// Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the probabilities of the
2022/// branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt parameters and returns true,
2023/// or returns false if no or invalid metadata was found.
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002024static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
2025 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
2026 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
2027 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
2028 MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
2029 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +00002030 ConstantInt *CITrue =
2031 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
2032 ConstantInt *CIFalse =
2033 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002034 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false;
2035 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
2036 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
2037 return true;
2038}
2039
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002040/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002041/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002042static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002043 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2044 return false;
2045 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
2046 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
2047 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2048 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2049 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2050 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2051 return true;
2052 }
2053 }
2054 return false;
2055}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002056
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002057/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2058/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2059/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002060bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002061 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002062
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002063 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002064 if (BI->isConditional())
2065 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2066 else {
2067 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2068 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2069 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2070 // predecessor.
2071 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2072 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2073 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2074 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2075 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
2076 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
2077 I != E; ) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002078 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002079 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2080 Cond = Curr;
2081 break;
2082 }
2083 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2084 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2085 return false;
2086 }
2087 }
2088
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002089 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002090 return false;
2091 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002092
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002093 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2094 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002095 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002096
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002097 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002098 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002099
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002100 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002101 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002102
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002103 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002104 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002105
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002106 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2107 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2108 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2109 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2110 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2111 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
2112 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != I; ++I) {
2113 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2114 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2115 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002116 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002117 return false;
2118 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2119 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2120 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2121 return false;
2122 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2123 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2124 // and Cond.
2125 ++NumBonusInsts;
2126 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2127 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2128 return false;
2129 }
2130
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002131 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2132 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2133 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2134 if (CE->canTrap())
2135 return false;
2136 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2137 if (CE->canTrap())
2138 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002139
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002140 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2141 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002142 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002143 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2144 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002145
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002146 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2147 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002148 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002149
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002150 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2151 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2152 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002153 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002154 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002155 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002156 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2157 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2158 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002159 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002160
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002161 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002162 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002163 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002164
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002165 if (BI->isConditional()) {
2166 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest)
2167 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2168 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest)
2169 Opc = Instruction::And;
2170 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest)
2171 Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true;
2172 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest)
2173 Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true;
2174 else
2175 continue;
2176 } else {
2177 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2178 continue;
2179 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002180
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002181 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002182 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002183
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002184 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2185 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002186 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002187
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002188 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2189 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2190 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2191 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002192 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002193 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002194 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002195
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002196 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002197 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002198 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002199
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002200 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002201 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002202 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2203 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2204 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002205 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002206 // instructions.
2207 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
2208 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2209 continue;
2210 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2211 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
2212 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002213 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002214
2215 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2216 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2217 // only given the branch precondition.
2218 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2219 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002220 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002221
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002222 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2223 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002224 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002225 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002226
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002227 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2228 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002229 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002230 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
2231 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002232 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002233 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002234 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002235
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002236 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002237 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002238 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002239 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002240 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2241
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002242 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002243 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2244 PredFalseWeight);
2245 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2246 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002247 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2248
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002249 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002250 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2251 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2252 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2253 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2254 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2255 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2256 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2257 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2258 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2259 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2260 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2261 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002262 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2263 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2264 }
2265 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002266 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2267 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2268 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2269 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2270 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2271 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2272 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2273 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2274 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2275 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002276 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2277 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2278 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002279 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2280 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2281 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2282
2283 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2284 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2285 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2286 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2287 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002288 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002289 } else {
2290 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2291 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002292 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002293 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2294 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002295 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002296 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2297 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2298 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2299 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2300 Instruction *NotCond =
2301 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2302 "not.cond"));
2303 MergedCond =
2304 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2305 NotCond, New,
2306 "and.cond"));
2307 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2308 MergedCond =
2309 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2310 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2311 "or.cond"));
2312 } else {
2313 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2314 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2315 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002316 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002317 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2318 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2319 "and.cond"));
2320 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2321 Instruction *NotCond =
2322 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2323 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002324 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002325 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2326 NotCond, MergedCond,
2327 "or.cond"));
2328 }
2329 }
2330 // Update PHI Node.
2331 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2332 MergedCond);
2333 }
2334 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2335 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2336 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2337 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002338 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002339
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002340 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2341 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2342
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002343 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2344 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2345 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2346 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002347
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002348 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002349 }
2350 return false;
2351}
2352
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002353// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2354// nullptr.
2355static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2356 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2357 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2358 if (!BB)
2359 continue;
2360 for (auto &I : *BB)
2361 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2362 if (S)
2363 // Multiple stores seen.
2364 return nullptr;
2365 else
2366 S = SI;
2367 }
2368 }
2369 return S;
2370}
2371
2372static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2373 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2374 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2375 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2376 //
2377 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2378 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2379 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2380 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2381 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2382 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2383 // one.
2384 //
2385 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2386 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2387 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2388 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2389 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
2390
2391 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2392 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2393 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2394 if (!AlternativeV)
2395 break;
2396
2397 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2398 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2399 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2400 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2401 break;
2402 PHI = nullptr;
2403 }
2404 if (PHI)
2405 return PHI;
2406
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002407 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002408 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2409 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2410 if (PredBB != BB)
2411 PHI->addIncoming(AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()),
2412 PredBB);
2413 return PHI;
2414}
2415
2416static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2417 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2418 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2419 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2420 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2421 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2422 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2423 };
2424
2425 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2426 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2427 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2428 if (!BB)
2429 return true;
2430 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2431 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2432 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002433 unsigned N = 0;
2434 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2435 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2436 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2437 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2438 ++N;
2439 // Free instructions.
2440 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2441 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2442 continue;
2443 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002444 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002445 }
2446 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002447 };
2448
2449 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively && (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) ||
2450 !IsWorthwhile(PFB) ||
2451 !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2452 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
2453 return false;
2454
2455 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2456 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2457 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2458 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2459 // testing.
2460 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2461 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2462 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2463 return false;
2464
2465 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2466 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2467 return false;
2468
2469 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2470 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2471 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2472 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2473 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2474 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2475 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2476 //
2477 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2478 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2479 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2480 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2481 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2482 return false;
2483 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2484 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2485 return false;
2486 if (QTB)
2487 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2488 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2489 return false;
2490 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2491 I != E; ++I)
2492 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2493 return false;
2494
2495 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2496 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2497 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2498 ->getCondition();
2499 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2500 ->getCondition();
2501
2502 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2503 PStore->getParent());
2504 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2505 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2506
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002507 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2508
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002509 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2510 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2511
2512 if (InvertPCond)
2513 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2514 if (InvertQCond)
2515 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2516 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2517
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002518 auto *T =
2519 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002520 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2521 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2522 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2523 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2524 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2525 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2526
2527 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2528 PStore->eraseFromParent();
2529
2530 return true;
2531}
2532
2533static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2534 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2535 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2536 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2537 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2538 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2539 // PBI and QBI.
2540 //
2541 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2542 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2543 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2544 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2545 //
2546 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2547 //
2548 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2549 // / \ | \
2550 // PTB PFB | PFB
2551 // \ / | /
2552 // QBI QBI
2553 // / \ | \
2554 // QTB QFB | QFB
2555 // \ / | /
2556 // PostBB PostBB
2557 //
2558 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2559 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2560 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
2561 //
2562 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2563 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2564 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2565 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2566 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2567
2568 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2569 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2570 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2571 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2572 InvertPCond = true;
2573 }
2574 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2575 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2576 InvertQCond = true;
2577 }
2578
2579 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2580 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2581 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2582 PTB = nullptr;
2583 if (QTB == PostBB)
2584 QTB = nullptr;
2585
2586 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2587 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2588 // predecessor.
2589 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
2590 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P &&
2591 BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
2592 };
2593 if (!PostBB ||
2594 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2595 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2596 return false;
2597 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2598 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2599 return false;
2600 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2601 return false;
2602
2603 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2604 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
2605 SmallPtrSet<Value *,4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
2606 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2607 if (!BB)
2608 continue;
2609 for (auto &I : *BB)
2610 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2611 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2612 }
2613 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2614 if (!BB)
2615 continue;
2616 for (auto &I : *BB)
2617 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2618 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2619 }
2620
2621 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2622 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2623 // clear what it contains.
2624 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2625
2626 bool Changed = false;
2627 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2628 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2629 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2630 return Changed;
2631}
2632
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002633/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2634/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002635/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2636/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002637static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2638 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002639 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2640 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002641
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002642 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002643 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002644 // this conditional branch redundant.
2645 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2646 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2647 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2648 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2649 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2650 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2651 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002652 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002653 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002654 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2655 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002656
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002657 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2658 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2659 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2660 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002661 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002662 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2663 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2664 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002665 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2666 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2667 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002668 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002669 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2670 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002671 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2672 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2673 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2674 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002675 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002676 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002677 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002678 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002679 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002680 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002681
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002682 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002683 return true;
2684 }
2685 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002686
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002687 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2688 if (CE->canTrap())
2689 return false;
2690
Philip Reames846e3e42015-10-29 03:11:49 +00002691 // If BI is reached from the true path of PBI and PBI's condition implies
2692 // BI's condition, we know the direction of the BI branch.
2693 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getParent() &&
Sanjoy Das55ea67c2015-11-06 19:01:08 +00002694 isImpliedCondition(PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL) &&
Philip Reames846e3e42015-10-29 03:11:49 +00002695 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
2696 BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2697 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2698 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
2699 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext()));
2700 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
2701 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2702 }
2703
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002704 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2705 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2706 // merged store at the end.
2707 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2708 return true;
2709
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002710 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002711 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002712 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002713 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2714 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2715 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2716 ++BBI;
2717 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002718 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002719
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002720 int PBIOp, BIOp;
2721 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2722 PBIOp = BIOp = 0;
2723 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2724 PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1;
2725 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2726 PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0;
2727 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2728 PBIOp = BIOp = 1;
2729 else
2730 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002731
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002732 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2733 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2734 // keep getting unwound.
2735 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2736 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002737
2738 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002739 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2740 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002741
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002742 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2743 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2744 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2745
2746 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002747 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2748 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002749 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002750 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2751 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002752
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002753 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2754 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2755 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2756 if (CE->canTrap())
2757 return false;
2758
2759 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2760 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2761 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2762 if (CE->canTrap())
2763 return false;
2764 }
2765
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002766 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002767 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002768
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002769 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002770 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002771
2772
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002773 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2774 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2775 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2776 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2777 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2778 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2779 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2780 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2781 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2782 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002783 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2784 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002785 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2786 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002787 }
2788
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002789 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002790
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002791 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2792 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002793
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002794 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2795 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002796 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002797 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002798 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2799
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002800 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2801 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002802 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2803
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002804 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002805 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002806
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002807 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2808 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2809 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2810 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002811
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002812 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2813 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002814 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2815 PredFalseWeight);
2816 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2817 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002818 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2819 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2820 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2821 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2822 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2823 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2824 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2825 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002826 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2827 PredOther * SuccCommon,
2828 PredOther * SuccOther};
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002829 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2830 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2831
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002832 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002833 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2834 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002835 }
2836
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002837 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2838 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002839 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002840
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002841 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2842 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2843 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2844 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002845 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002846 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2847 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2848 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2849 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2850 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2851 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2852 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002853 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
2854 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002855 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002856 }
2857 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002858
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002859 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2860 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002861
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002862 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2863 // one fewer predecessor.
2864 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002865}
2866
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002867// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
2868// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002869// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2870// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2871// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2872static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002873 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2874 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2875 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002876 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2877 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2878 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2879 // successor.
2880 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002881 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002882
2883 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00002884 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002885 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2886 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002887 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002888 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002889 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002890 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00002891 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
2892 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002893 }
2894
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002895 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2896 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2897
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002898 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002899 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002900 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2901 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2902 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002903 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002904 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002905 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2906 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002907 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2908 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2909 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2910 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2911 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2912 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002913 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2914 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2915 // terminator must be unreachable.
2916 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2917 } else {
2918 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2919 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2920 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002921 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002922 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002923 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002924 else
2925 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002926 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002927 }
2928
2929 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2930 return true;
2931}
2932
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002933// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002934// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2935// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2936// unconditional otherwise.
2937static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2938 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2939 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2940 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2941 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2942 return false;
2943
2944 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2945 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002946 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2947 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002948
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002949 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2950 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2951 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2952 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2953 if (HasWeights) {
2954 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2955 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2956 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2957 getSuccessorIndex()];
2958 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2959 getSuccessorIndex()];
2960 }
2961 }
2962
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002963 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002964 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2965 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002966}
2967
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002968// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002969// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
2970// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
2971// with
2972// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
2973static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
2974 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
2975 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
2976 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
2977 if (!TBA || !FBA)
2978 return false;
2979
2980 // Extract the actual blocks.
2981 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
2982 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
2983
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002984 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002985 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
2986 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002987}
2988
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002989/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
2990/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002991/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
2992/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
2993/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
2994/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
2995/// like:
2996///
2997/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
2998/// DEFAULT:
2999/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3000/// br label %end
3001/// end:
3002/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003003///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003004/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3005/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003006static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003007 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3008 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3009 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003010 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003011
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003012 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3013 // complex.
3014 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
3015
3016 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3017 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003018
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003019 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3020 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3021 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3022 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003023 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003024
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003025 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3026 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3027 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003028
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003029 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3030 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3031 // away.
3032 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3033 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3034 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3035 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003036
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003037 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003038 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003039 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3040 }
3041 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003042 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003043 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003044
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003045 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3046 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3047 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003048 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003049 Value *V;
3050 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3051 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3052 else
3053 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003054
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003055 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3056 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3057 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003058 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003059 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003060
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003061 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3062 // the block.
3063 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003064 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003065 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003066 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3067 return false;
3068
3069 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3070 // true in the PHI.
3071 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
3072 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3073
3074 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3075 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3076
3077 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3078 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3079 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3080 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3081
3082 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3083 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
3084 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
3085 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003086 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3087 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3088 if (HasWeights) {
3089 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3090 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3091 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
3092 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
3093 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3094
3095 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3096 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3097 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
3098 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3099 }
3100 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003101 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003102
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003103 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003104 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3105 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3106 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003107 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3108 return true;
3109}
3110
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003111/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003112/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3113/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003114static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3115 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003116 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003117 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003118
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003119 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3120 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3121 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003122
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003123 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003124 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3125 // Unpack the result
3126 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt*> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
3127 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3128 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3129 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003130
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003131 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003132 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003133
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003134 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3135 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3136 return false;
3137
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003138 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3139
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003140 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3141 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3142 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3143 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003144
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003145 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003146 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003147 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003148
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003149 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3150 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3151
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003152 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3153 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
3154 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3155 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003156
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003157 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003158
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003159 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003160 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003161
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003162 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3163 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3164 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3165 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003166 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3167 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003168 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3169 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003170 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3171
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003172 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003173 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003174 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003175 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003176
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003177 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003178
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003179 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3180 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003181 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003182
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003183 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3184 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003185 BB = NewBB;
3186 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003187
3188 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003189 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3190 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003191 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3192 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003193 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003194
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003195 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003196 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003197
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003198 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3199 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3200 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003201
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003202 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3203 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3204 // the number of edges added.
3205 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
3206 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3207 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3208 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3209 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
3210 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3211 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003212
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003213 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3214 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003215
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003216 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003217 return true;
3218}
3219
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003220bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3221 // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught
3222 // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls.
3223 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3224 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003225 if (RI->getValue() != LPInst)
3226 // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that
3227 // caused control to branch here.
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003228 return false;
3229
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003230 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3231 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003232 while (++I != E)
3233 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3234 return false;
3235
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003236 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003237 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3238 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3239 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003240 }
3241
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003242 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3243 BB->eraseFromParent();
3244 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003245}
3246
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003247bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3248 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3249 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3250 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3251 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3252 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3253 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3254 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3255 // simplified.
3256 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003257 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3258 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003259 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3260 return false;
3261
3262 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003263 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003264 while (++I != E)
3265 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3266 return false;
3267
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003268 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3269 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003270 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003271 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003272
3273 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3274 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3275 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3276 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3277 // are both EH pads).
3278 if (UnwindDest) {
3279 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3280 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003281 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003282 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003283 I != IE; ++I) {
3284 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003285
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003286 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003287 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003288 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003289 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3290 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3291 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3292 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3293 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3294 // pad being removed.
3295 //
3296 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3297 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3298 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3299 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3300 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3301 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3302
3303 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3304 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3305
3306 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3307 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3308 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3309 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003310 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003311 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
3312 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3313 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3314 }
3315 } else {
3316 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3317 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3318 // predecessors with this value.
3319 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3320 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3321 }
3322 }
3323 }
3324
3325 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003326 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003327 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3328 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003329 I != IE;) {
3330 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3331 // being moved to another block.
3332 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3333 if (PN->use_empty())
3334 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3335 // when we erase BB below.
3336 continue;
3337
3338 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3339 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3340 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3341 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3342 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3343 if (pred != BB)
3344 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3345 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3346 }
3347 }
3348
3349 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3350 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3351 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003352 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003353 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003354 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003355 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003356 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003357 }
3358 }
3359
3360 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3361 BB->eraseFromParent();
3362 return true;
3363}
3364
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003365bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003366 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3367 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003368
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003369 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
3370 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3371 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003372 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3373 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003374 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3375 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3376 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3377 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3378 else
3379 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3380 }
3381 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003382
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003383 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003384 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003385 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3386 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3387 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
3388 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003389 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003390 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003391
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003392 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003393 if (pred_empty(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003394 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3395 BB->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003396
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003397 return true;
3398 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003399
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003400 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3401 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3402 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3403 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3404 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003405
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003406 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3407 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3408 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003409 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003410 return true;
3411 }
3412 return false;
3413}
3414
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003415bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3416 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003417
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003418 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003419
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003420 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3421 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003422 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3423 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003424 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003425 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3426 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3427 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003428 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003429
3430 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
3431 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
3432 if (SI->isVolatile())
3433 break;
3434 } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
3435 if (LI->isVolatile())
3436 break;
3437 } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
3438 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3439 break;
3440 } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
3441 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3442 break;
3443 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3444 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003445 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003446 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003447 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3448 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3449 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3450 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003451 }
3452
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003453 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3454 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3455 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003456 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003457 Changed = true;
3458 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003459
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003460 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3461 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3462 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003463
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003464 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3465 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3466 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003467 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003468 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
3469 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3470 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3471 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3472 TI->eraseFromParent();
3473 Changed = true;
3474 }
3475 } else {
3476 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003477 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003478 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3479 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003480 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003481 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3482 Changed = true;
3483 }
3484 }
3485 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003486 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003487 i != e; ++i)
3488 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003489 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3490 SI->removeCase(i);
3491 --i; --e;
3492 Changed = true;
3493 }
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003494 } else if ((isa<InvokeInst>(TI) &&
3495 cast<InvokeInst>(TI)->getUnwindDest() == BB) ||
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003496 isa<TerminatePadInst>(TI) || isa<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003497 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3498 Changed = true;
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003499 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003500 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3501 TI->eraseFromParent();
3502 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003503 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003504 // TODO: We can remove a catchswitch if all it's catchpads end in
3505 // unreachable.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003506 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003507
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003508 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003509 if (pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003510 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3511 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3512 BB->eraseFromParent();
3513 return true;
3514 }
3515
3516 return Changed;
3517}
3518
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003519static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3520 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3521
3522 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3523 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3524 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3525 return false;
3526 }
3527 return true;
3528}
3529
3530/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3531/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003532static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003533 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003534
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003535 bool HasDefault =
3536 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003537
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003538 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3539 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3540 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
3541 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3542 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
3543
3544 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3545 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
3546 if (!DestA) DestA = Dest;
3547 if (Dest == DestA) {
3548 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3549 continue;
3550 }
3551 if (!DestB) DestB = Dest;
3552 if (Dest == DestB) {
3553 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3554 continue;
3555 }
3556 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003557 }
3558
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003559 assert(DestA && DestB && "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
3560 assert(DestA != DestB);
3561 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3562 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3563 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3564
3565 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3566 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3567 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3568 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3569 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3570 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3571 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3572 OtherDest = DestB;
3573 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3574 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3575 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3576 OtherDest = DestA;
3577 } else
3578 return false;
3579
3580 // Start building the compare and branch.
3581
3582 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
3583 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003584
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003585 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3586 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003587 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3588
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003589 Value *Cmp;
3590 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003591 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003592 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3593 else
3594 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003595 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003596
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003597 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003598 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3599 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003600 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3601 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003602 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3603 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3604 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3605 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3606 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3607 else
3608 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3609 }
3610 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3611 TrueWeight /= 2;
3612 FalseWeight /= 2;
3613 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003614 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003615 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(
3616 (uint32_t)TrueWeight, (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003617 }
3618 }
3619
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003620 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3621 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3622 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
3623 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3624 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003625 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3626 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003627 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3628 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
3629 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3630 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3631 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3632 }
3633
3634 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003635 SI->eraseFromParent();
3636
3637 return true;
3638}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003639
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003640/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003641/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003642static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
3643 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003644 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003645 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003646 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003647 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003648
3649 // Gather dead cases.
3650 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003651 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003652 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3653 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3654 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003655 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003656 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003657 }
3658 }
3659
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003660 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003661 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
3662 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
3663 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003664 bool HasDefault =
3665 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003666 const unsigned NumUnknownBits = Bits -
3667 (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00003668 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003669 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
3670 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
3671 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003672 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
3673 BasicBlock *NewDefault = SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(),
3674 SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003675 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
3676 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003677 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
3678 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
3679 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
3680 return true;
3681 }
3682
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003683 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3684 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3685 if (HasWeight) {
3686 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3687 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3688 }
3689
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003690 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3691 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003692 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003693 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003694 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003695 if (HasWeight) {
3696 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3697 Weights.pop_back();
3698 }
3699
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003700 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003701 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003702 SI->removeCase(Case);
3703 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003704 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003705 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3706 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3707 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3708 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3709 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003710
3711 return !DeadCases.empty();
3712}
3713
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003714/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
3715/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003716/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3717/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3718/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3719static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3720 BasicBlock *BB,
3721 int *PhiIndex) {
3722 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003723 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003724 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003725 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003726
3727 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3728 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003729 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003730
3731 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3732
3733 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3734 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3735 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3736 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3737
3738 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3739 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3740
3741 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3742 return PHI;
3743 }
3744
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003745 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003746}
3747
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003748/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
3749/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
3750/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003751/// Returns true if a change is made.
3752static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3753 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3754 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3755
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003756 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003757 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3758 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003759
3760 int PhiIndex;
3761 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3762 &PhiIndex);
3763 if (!PHI) continue;
3764
3765 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3766 }
3767
3768 bool Changed = false;
3769
3770 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3771 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3772 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003773 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003774
3775 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3776
3777 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3778 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3779 Changed = true;
3780 }
3781
3782 return Changed;
3783}
3784
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003785/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003786/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003787static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003788 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3789 return false;
3790 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
3791 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003792
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00003793 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
3794 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
3795
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003796 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
3797 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
3798 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
3799 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
3800 isa<UndefValue>(C);
3801}
3802
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003803/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003804/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003805static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
3806 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
3807 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
3808 return C;
3809 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
3810}
3811
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003812/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003813/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
3814/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003815/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003816static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003817ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
3818 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003819 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003820 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
3821 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003822 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003823 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
3824 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
3825 if (A->isNullValue())
3826 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003827 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003828 }
3829
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003830 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
3831 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
3832 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
3833 COps.push_back(A);
3834 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003835 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003836 }
3837
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003838 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003839 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
3840 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003841 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003842
3843 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I->getOpcode(), I->getType(), COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003844}
3845
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003846/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003847/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003848/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003849/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003850static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003851GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003852 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003853 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
3854 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003855 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
3856 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
3857
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003858 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
3859 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
3860 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
3861 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
3862 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
3863 ++I) {
3864 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
3865 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
3866 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
3867 return false;
3868 Pred = CaseDest;
3869 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
3870 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3871 // Skip debug intrinsic.
3872 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003873 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003874 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00003875
3876 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
3877 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
3878 // no longer dominate all its uses.
3879 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
3880 User *User = Use.getUser();
3881 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
3882 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
3883 continue;
3884 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
3885 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
3886 continue;
3887 return false;
3888 }
3889
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003890 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003891 } else {
3892 break;
3893 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003894 }
3895
3896 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
3897 if (!*CommonDest)
3898 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
3899 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
3900 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
3901 return false;
3902
3903 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
3904 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
3905 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3906 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
3907 if (Idx == -1)
3908 continue;
3909
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003910 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
3911 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003912 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003913 return false;
3914
3915 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
3916 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
3917 return false;
3918
3919 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
3920 }
3921
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003922 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003923}
3924
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003925// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
3926// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003927static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3928 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3929 Constant *Result) {
3930 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
3931 if (I.first == Result) {
3932 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
3933 return;
3934 }
3935 }
3936 UniqueResults.push_back(std::make_pair(Result,
3937 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
3938}
3939
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003940// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003941// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
3942// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
3943// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003944static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
3945 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
3946 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3947 Constant *&DefaultResult,
3948 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003949 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
3950 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
3951
3952 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
3953 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
3954 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
3955 DL))
3956 return false;
3957
3958 // Only one value per case is permitted
3959 if (Results.size() > 1)
3960 return false;
3961 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
3962
3963 // Check the PHI consistency.
3964 if (!PHI)
3965 PHI = Results[0].first;
3966 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
3967 return false;
3968 }
3969 // Find the default result value.
3970 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
3971 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
3972 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
3973 DL);
3974 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
3975 // is unreachable.
3976 DefaultResult =
3977 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
3978 if ((!DefaultResult &&
3979 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
3980 return false;
3981
3982 return true;
3983}
3984
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003985// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
3986// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003987// Example:
3988// switch (a) {
3989// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
3990// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
3991// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
3992// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
3993// default:
3994// return 4;
3995// }
3996static Value *
3997ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
3998 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
3999 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4000 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
4001 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
4002 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4003 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4004 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4005 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4006 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4007 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4008
4009 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4010 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4011 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4012 Value *const ValueCompare =
4013 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4014 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4015 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4016 }
4017 Value *const ValueCompare =
4018 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4019 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first, SelectValue,
4020 "switch.select");
4021 }
4022
4023 return nullptr;
4024}
4025
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004026// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4027// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004028static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4029 Value *SelectValue,
4030 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4031 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4032 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4033 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4034 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4035
4036 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4037
4038 // Remove the switch.
4039 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4040 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4041
4042 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4043 continue;
4044 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4045 }
4046 SI->eraseFromParent();
4047}
4048
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004049/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004050/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4051/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4052static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004053 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004054 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4055 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4056 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4057 Constant *DefaultResult;
4058 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4059 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004060 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4061 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004062 return false;
4063 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4064 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4065 return false;
4066 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4067
4068 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4069 Value *SelectValue = ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(
4070 UniqueResults,
4071 DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
4072 if (SelectValue) {
4073 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4074 return true;
4075 }
4076 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4077 return false;
4078}
4079
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004080namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004081 /// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004082 class SwitchLookupTable {
4083 public:
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004084 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4085 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004086 SwitchLookupTable(
4087 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4088 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4089 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004090
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004091 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004092 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004093 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004094
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004095 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004096 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004097 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004098 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004099
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004100 private:
4101 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4102 // different ways.
4103 enum {
4104 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4105 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4106 SingleValueKind,
4107
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004108 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4109 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4110 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4111 LinearMapKind,
4112
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004113 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4114 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4115 // shift and mask operations.
4116 BitMapKind,
4117
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004118 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4119 // instructions from the table.
4120 ArrayKind
4121 } Kind;
4122
4123 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4124 Constant *SingleValue;
4125
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004126 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4127 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4128 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
4129
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004130 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4131 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4132 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
4133
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004134 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4135 GlobalVariable *Array;
4136 };
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004137}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004138
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004139SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4140 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4141 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4142 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004143 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004144 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004145 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4146 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004147
4148 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004149 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004150
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004151 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4152
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004153 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004154 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
4155 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4156 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4157 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004158 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004159
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004160 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
4161 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004162 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4163
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004164 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004165 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004166 }
4167
4168 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004169 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004170 assert(DefaultValue &&
4171 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004172 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004173 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4174 if (!TableContents[I])
4175 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004176 }
4177
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004178 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004179 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004180 }
4181
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004182 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4183 // that single value.
4184 if (SingleValue) {
4185 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4186 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004187 }
4188
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004189 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4190 // table index.
4191 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4192 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4193 APInt PrevVal;
4194 APInt DistToPrev;
4195 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4196 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4197 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4198 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4199 if (!ConstVal) {
4200 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4201 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4202 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4203 break;
4204 }
4205 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4206 if (I != 0) {
4207 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4208 if (I == 1) {
4209 DistToPrev = Dist;
4210 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4211 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4212 break;
4213 }
4214 }
4215 PrevVal = Val;
4216 }
4217 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4218 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4219 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4220 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4221 ++NumLinearMaps;
4222 return;
4223 }
4224 }
4225
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004226 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004227 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004228 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004229 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4230 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4231 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004232 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4233 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4234 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4235 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4236 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004237 }
4238 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4239 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4240 Kind = BitMapKind;
4241 ++NumBitMaps;
4242 return;
4243 }
4244
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004245 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004246 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004247 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4248
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004249 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
4250 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
4251 Initializer,
4252 "switch.table");
4253 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
4254 Kind = ArrayKind;
4255}
4256
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004257Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004258 switch (Kind) {
4259 case SingleValueKind:
4260 return SingleValue;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004261 case LinearMapKind: {
4262 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4263 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4264 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4265 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4266 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4267 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4268 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4269 return Result;
4270 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004271 case BitMapKind: {
4272 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4273 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
4274
4275 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4276 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4277 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00004278 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004279
4280 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4281 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
4282 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4283 "switch.shiftamt");
4284
4285 // Shift down.
4286 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
4287 "switch.downshift");
4288 // Mask off.
4289 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
4290 "switch.masked");
4291 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004292 case ArrayKind: {
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004293 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004294 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4295 uint64_t TableSize = Array->getInitializer()->getType()
4296 ->getArrayNumElements();
4297 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4298 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(Index,
4299 IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(),
4300 IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4301 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004302
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004303 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
David Blaikieaa41cd52015-04-03 21:33:42 +00004304 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4305 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004306 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4307 }
4308 }
4309 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4310}
4311
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004312bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004313 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004314 Type *ElementType) {
4315 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004316 if (!IT)
4317 return false;
4318 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4319 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004320
4321 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
4322 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
4323 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004324 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004325}
4326
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004327/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4328/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004329static bool
4330ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4331 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4332 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004333 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4334 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004335
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004336 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004337 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004338 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4339 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004340
4341 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004342 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004343
4344 // Saturate this flag to false.
4345 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004346 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004347
4348 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4349 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4350 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4351 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004352 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004353 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004354
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004355 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4356 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4357 return true;
4358
4359 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4360 if (HasIllegalType)
4361 return false;
4362
4363 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4364 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4365 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4366 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004367}
4368
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004369/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4370/// \code
4371/// if (idx < tablesize)
4372/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4373/// else
4374/// r = default_value;
4375/// if (r != default_value)
4376/// ...
4377/// \endcode
4378/// Is optimized to:
4379/// \code
4380/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4381/// if (cond)
4382/// r = table[idx];
4383/// else
4384/// r = default_value;
4385/// if (cond)
4386/// ...
4387/// \endcode
4388/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
4389static void reuseTableCompare(User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock,
4390 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch, Constant *DefaultValue,
4391 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values) {
4392
4393 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4394 if (!CmpInst)
4395 return;
4396
4397 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4398 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4399 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4400 return;
4401
4402 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4403 if (!CmpOp1)
4404 return;
4405
4406 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4407 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4408 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4409
4410 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4411 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4412 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4413 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4414 return;
4415
4416 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4417 // compare result.
4418 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4419 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4420 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
4421 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4422 return;
4423 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4424 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4425 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00004426
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004427 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4428 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4429 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4430 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4431 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4432 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4433 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4434 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4435 return;
4436 }
4437
4438 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4439 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4440 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4441 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4442 } else {
4443 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
4444 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(RangeCmp,
4445 ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4446 RangeCheckBranch);
4447 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4448 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4449 }
4450}
4451
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004452/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4453/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4454/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004455static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4456 const DataLayout &DL,
4457 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004458 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004459
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004460 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004461 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004462 return false;
4463
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004464 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4465 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4466
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004467 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4468 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4469 // string and lookup indices into that.
4470
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004471 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
4472 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4473 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004474 return false;
4475
4476 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004477 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004478 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4479 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4480 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4481 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4482
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004483 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004484 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004485 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4486 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
4487 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
4488 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
4489
4490 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4491 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4492 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4493 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4494 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4495 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4496
4497 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4498 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
4499 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004500 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004501 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004502 return false;
4503
4504 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004505 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4506 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4507 Constant *Value = I.second;
4508 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4509 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4510 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004511 }
4512 }
4513
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004514 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004515 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004516 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4517 }
4518
4519 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4520 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4521 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4522 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4523
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004524 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4525 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004526 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004527 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004528 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004529
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004530 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4531 if (NeedMask) {
4532 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
4533 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
4534 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004535 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004536 return false;
4537 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004538
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004539 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4540 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4541 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004542 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004543 }
4544
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004545 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004546 return false;
4547
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004548 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004549 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004550 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4551 "switch.lookup",
4552 CommonDest->getParent(),
4553 CommonDest);
4554
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004555 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004556 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4557 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
4558 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004559
4560 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4561 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004562 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004563 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004564 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4565 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4566 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4567
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004568 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4569 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4570 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4571 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4572 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4573 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004574 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4575
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004576 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004577 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004578 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
4579 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004580 } else {
4581 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004582 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004583 RangeCheckBranch = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004584 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004585
4586 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4587 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004588
4589 if (NeedMask) {
4590 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4591 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4592 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4593 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4594 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
4595 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4596 "switch.lookup",
4597 CommonDest->getParent(),
4598 CommonDest);
4599
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004600 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4601 // unnecessary illegal types.
4602 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4603 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4604 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004605 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004606 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4607 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4608 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
4609 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
4610 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4611 }
4612 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4613
4614 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4615 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4616 // else continue with table lookup.
4617 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
4618 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
4619 "switch.maskindex");
4620 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
4621 "switch.shifted");
4622 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
4623 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
4624 "switch.lobit");
4625 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4626
4627 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4628 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4629 }
4630
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004631 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
4632 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4633 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4634 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
4635 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
4636 }
4637
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004638 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004639 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4640 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004641 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004642
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004643 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4644 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004645 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004646
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004647 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004648
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004649 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
4650 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004651 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
4652 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004653 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
4654 ReturnedEarly = true;
4655 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004656 }
4657
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004658 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
4659 // possible.
4660 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
4661 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
4662 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
4663 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
4664 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
4665 }
4666 }
4667
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004668 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004669 }
4670
4671 if (!ReturnedEarly)
4672 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
4673
4674 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004675 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004676 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004677
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004678 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004679 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004680 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4681 }
4682 SI->eraseFromParent();
4683
4684 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004685 if (NeedMask)
4686 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004687 return true;
4688}
4689
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004690bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004691 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
4692
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004693 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
4694 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4695 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
4696 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
4697 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004698 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004699
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004700 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
4701 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
4702 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004703 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004704
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004705 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
4706 // away into any preds.
4707 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
4708 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4709 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4710 ++BBI;
4711 if (SI == &*BBI)
4712 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004713 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004714 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004715
4716 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004717 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004718 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004719
4720 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004721 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
4722 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004723
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004724 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
4725 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004726
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004727 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004728 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004729
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004730 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
4731 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004732
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004733 return false;
4734}
4735
4736bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
4737 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
4738 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004739
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004740 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
4741 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
4742 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
4743 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00004744 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004745 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
4746 IBI->removeDestination(i);
4747 --i; --e;
4748 Changed = true;
4749 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004750 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004751
4752 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
4753 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
4754 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
4755 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4756 return true;
4757 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004758
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004759 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
4760 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
4761 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
4762 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4763 return true;
4764 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004765
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004766 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
4767 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004768 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004769 }
4770 return Changed;
4771}
4772
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00004773/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
4774/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
4775/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
4776/// a shared handler.
4777///
4778/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
4779/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
4780/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
4781/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
4782/// sinking in this file)
4783///
4784/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
4785/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
4786/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
4787/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
4788/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
4789/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
4790///
4791/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
4792/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
4793/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
4794static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
4795 BasicBlock *BB) {
4796 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
4797 assert(Succ);
4798 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
4799 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
4800 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
4801 return false;
4802
4803 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
4804 if (BB == OtherPred)
4805 continue;
4806 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
4807 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
4808 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
4809 continue;
4810 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
4811 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
4812 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
4813 continue;
4814
4815 // We've found an identical block. Update our predeccessors to take that
4816 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
4817 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
4818 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
4819 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
4820 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
4821 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB &&
4822 II->getUnwindDest() == BB && "unexpected successor");
4823 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
4824 }
4825
4826 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
4827 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
4828 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end();
4829 I != E;) {
4830 Instruction &Inst = *I; I++;
4831 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
4832 Inst.eraseFromParent();
4833 }
4834
4835 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
4836 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
4837 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
4838 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
4839 }
4840
4841 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
4842 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
4843 BI->eraseFromParent();
4844 return true;
4845 }
4846 return false;
4847}
4848
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004849bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004850 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004851
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00004852 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
4853 return true;
4854
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004855 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004856 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004857 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
4858 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
4859 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004860
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004861 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
4862 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
4863 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
4864 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
4865 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
4866 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004867 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004868 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
4869 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004870 return true;
4871 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004872
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00004873 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
4874 // equivalent.
4875 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
4876 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
4877 if (I->isTerminator() &&
4878 TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
4879 return true;
4880 }
4881
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00004882 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4883 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
4884 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
4885 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004886 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
4887 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004888 return false;
4889}
4890
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00004891static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
4892 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
4893 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
4894 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
4895 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
4896 return nullptr;
4897 PredPred = PPred;
4898 }
4899 return PredPred;
4900}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004901
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004902bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004903 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004904
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004905 // Conditional branch
4906 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
4907 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4908 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
4909 // switch.
4910 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004911 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004912 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004913
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004914 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
4915 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4916 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
4917 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4918 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4919 ++I;
4920 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004921 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004922 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004923 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
4924 ++I;
4925 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4926 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4927 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004928 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004929 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004930 }
4931 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004932
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004933 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004934 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004935 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004936
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00004937 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4938 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
4939 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004940 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
4941 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004942
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004943 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
4944 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
4945 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
4946 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004947 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
4948 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004949 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
4950 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004951 } else {
4952 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004953 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004954 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
4955 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4956 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004957 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
4958 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004959 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004960 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004961 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004962 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004963 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
4964 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4965 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004966 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
4967 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004968 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004969
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004970 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
4971 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
4972 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
4973 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004974 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004975 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004976
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004977 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004978 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
4979 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004980 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00004981 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004982 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004983
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00004984 // Look for diamond patterns.
4985 if (MergeCondStores)
4986 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
4987 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
4988 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
4989 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
4990 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
4991
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004992 return false;
4993}
4994
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004995/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
4996static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
4997 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
4998 if (!C)
4999 return false;
5000
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005001 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005002 return false;
5003
5004 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005005 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005006 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005007
5008 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5009 // control flow (eg. calls)
5010 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005011 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005012 return false;
5013
5014 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5015 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5016 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5017 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5018
5019 // Look through bitcasts.
5020 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5021 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5022
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005023 // Load from null is undefined.
5024 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005025 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5026 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005027
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005028 // Store to null is undefined.
5029 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005030 if (!SI->isVolatile())
5031 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005032 }
5033 return false;
5034}
5035
5036/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005037/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005038static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5039 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5040 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5041 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5042 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5043 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5044 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5045 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5046 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5047 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5048 // destination from conditional branches.
5049 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5050 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5051 else
5052 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
5053 BI->getSuccessor(0));
5054 BI->eraseFromParent();
5055 return true;
5056 }
5057 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5058 }
5059
5060 return false;
5061}
5062
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005063bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005064 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005065
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005066 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005067 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005068
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005069 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5070 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Ramkumar Ramachandra181233b2015-01-13 04:17:47 +00005071 if ((pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005072 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005073 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00005074 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
Chris Lattner7eb270e2008-12-03 06:40:52 +00005075 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005076 return true;
5077 }
5078
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005079 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5080 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005081 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005082
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005083 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5084 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5085
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005086 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5087 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5088
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005089 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5090 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5091 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5092 //
5093 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5094 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005095
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005096 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5097
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005098 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5099 // eliminate it, do so now.
5100 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5101 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005102 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005103
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005104 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005105 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005106 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00005107 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005108 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005109 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005110 }
5111 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00005112 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005113 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5114 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005115 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
5116 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5117 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005118 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005119 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005120 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
5121 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5122 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005123 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
5124 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5125 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005126 }
5127
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005128 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005129}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005130
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005131/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5132/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005133/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5134/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5135///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005136bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005137 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC) {
5138 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
5139 BonusInstThreshold, AC).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005140}